2012 FIAT 500/500c Owner`s Manual

2012 FIAT 500
2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
12FF500-126-AF
Sixth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FIAT Group Marketing &
Corporate Communication SpA, used under license by
Chrysler Group LLC.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
! Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ! Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
! How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ! Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
! Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techniThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to contains the information you desire.
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers:
• the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for contains a complete listing of all subjects.
maintaining its validity
Consult the following table for a description of the
• the range of additional services available to FIAT symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Group Automobiles customers
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
! A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function . . . . . . . 16
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
! Sentry Key# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
! Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
! Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 16 ! Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
! Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
! Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 36
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 36
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 46
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
! Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
! Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert#) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical
key simply press the mechanical key release button.
Mechanical Key Release Button
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC/ON/RUN position.
3. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in
“Maintaining
Your
Vehicle”
for
maintenance
information.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK, sounds a problem with the electronics.
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY$
The Sentry Key# Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key# from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• The Sentry Key# Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
the vehicle.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Replacement Keys
General Information
The Sentry Key# system complies with FCC rules part 15
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
subject to the following conditions:
a Sentry Key# has been programmed to a vehicle, it
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key
is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key# Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice,
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
Opening Power Top Remote Function
The remote keyless power top function can only be used
with the engine off.
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key
Release Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or
when it reaches the spoiler position.
NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with
the remote, please refer to the %Power Convertible Top
Relearn Procedure% in %Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle% for additional information.
WARNING!
Key Fob
NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be
used to open the power top to the spoiler position.
Opening Power Top Remote Function:
1. OPEN − Push and hold the unlock button down on
the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
(Continued)
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering
the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation.
• Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top
completely closed and latched or fully lowered
into its stowage compartment.
• Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is
in motion.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal. If a door is ajar the turn signal lights will flash at
an increased rate and there will be no horn chirp, this is
to indicate that a door is still ajar.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key# “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with distance, check for these two conditions:
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
following conditions:
of a battery is five years.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
2. This device must accept any interference that may be tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
received including interference that may cause undesired or CB radios.
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Press the mechanical key release button and release
the mechanical key to access the battery case screw
located on the side of the Key Fob.
Mechanical Key Release Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob
using a small screwdriver.
2
Battery Case Removed
Key Fob Screw Location
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from
inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door
handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the
door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed,
the door will lock.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
Door Lock Handle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the door
handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. If the door handle is pushed a red lock
indicator will show on the door handle (indicating
locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the
vehicle, the power door lock switch will not operate
when the key is in the ignition and either front door is
open. A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
key.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the
driver and passenger door windows. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
Driver Power Door Lock Handle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
2
Power Window Switches
Auto-Down — If Equipped
The driver’s door window switch may have an AutoDown feature. Press the window switch for approximately one second, release, and the window will go
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down move- LIFTGATE
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock
direction and release the switch.
switches located on the front door handles.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
Liftgate Handle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage
System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren).”
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
their arm.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in
&If You Need Consumer Assistance.&
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB), and when deployment occurs, the SABIC and
SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Side air bags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Positioning Lap Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
additional information, refer to “Installing Child ReLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
shoulder belt.
feature for each seating position.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
Driver
Passenger
anchor point.
First Row
N/A
ALR
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
Second Row
ALR
ALR
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
• N/A — Not Applicable
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
latch plate.
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
folded webbing.
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a %click.%
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
the entire belt is extracted.
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre- 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combinaHow To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
12 years old and under should always be properly
locking mode.
restrained in the rear seat.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert$)
BeltAlert# is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert#) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert# will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert# is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert# may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert# warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert# can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
dealer. FIAT Group Automobiles does not recommend
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
deactivating BeltAlert#.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder NOTE: Although BeltAlert# has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is BeltAlert#) seat belt remains unfastened.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
the best way to keep the baby safe.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
tender and store it.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental NOTE: These air bags are certified to the Federal
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
panel below the steering column.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the
air bags to have different inflation levels based on the
severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 3 — Supplemental Driver Side
vanced Front Air Bags
Knee Air Bag
2 — Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
• Steering Wheel and Column
the SABIC is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SAB are marked with • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
• Knee Impact Bolster
seats.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
authorized dealer immediately.
(SABIC)
Air Bag System Components
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The SAB are marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the
body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers,
placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant,
that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries.
The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows
on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location
NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) and Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) also work with
seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides required for this vehicle.
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Knee Impact Bolster
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemenpassenger side front passenger by positioning the pas- tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag
senger for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat belt pretensioners, as The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
required, depending on the severity and type of impact. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec- Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the have deployed.
risk of injury in rear or side collisions.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciThe Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, away from an inflating air bag.
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
ON/RUN or START position. If the key is in the OFF/
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
LOCK position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adtics also record the nature of the malfunction.
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of
the air bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
Unit
collision.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), depending on the severity and type of collision.
In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on
the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is
inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
event, the ORC will determine whether to have the After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- message %Fuel Cutoff See Handbook% is displayed.
ing functions:
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as System Reset Procedure
the battery has power or until the ignition key is After an impact causing air bag deployment, the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel
removed.
cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned
• Unlock the doors automatically.
off. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road
you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be
placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ON.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON.
Customer Will See
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS.
Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Action
4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
8. Turn ignition OFF.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Will See
Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID.
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF.
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec- If A Deployment Occurs
onds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
procedure must be performed again in order to be immediately after deployment.
successful.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the Body Control Module (BCM) fuse block inside
the vehicle for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on
the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
Standards. FIAT Group Automobiles also recommends
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
that you make sure that you can install the child
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before
you buy it.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
as possible.
weight and height limits.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
slouching can move the belt out of position.
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
not work when you need it.
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
For additional information, refer to
NOTE:
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canatheir back.
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webHere are some tips on getting the most out of your child site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
restraint:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” for typical installation instructions.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You should never install LATCH-compatible child
seats so that two seats share a common anchorage. If
installing seats in adjacent seating positions, or if
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
Installing The LATCH – Compatible Child
Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
The lower anchorages are round bars which are
part of the seat and body structure. They are
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and just visible when you
lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
intersection of the surfaces. The lower strap hooks are
passed over the top of each bar, pushing aside the seat
cover material.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position, located in the rear surface of the
seatback.
The lower strap hooks are passed over the top of each
bar, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be
equipped with separate straps on each side,
with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hook or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the seat cover material. Then attach the tether strap to
the anchorage directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint, preferably between the
head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove the
slack in the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
play with them. In addition, never leave unattended
children in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
“Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occu- portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
pant Restraints.”
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
The chart below defines the seating positions with an
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate. • In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
Driver
Passenger
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
CRS Lock
CRS Lock
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
First Row
N/A
ALR
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
Second Row
ALR
ALR
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough • If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
try a different seating position.
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
• Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
tether anchor. Remove slack in the tether strap accord• Route the tether strap under the head restraint to
ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
provide the most direct path for the strap between the
anchor and the child seat.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Straps Routed To Tether Anchors
• If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your VePets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
hicle”.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is or retractor condition, replace the belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
WARNING!
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
on while driving, have the system checked by an authovehicle control and increase the risk of serious perrized dealer.
sonal injury.
Defroster
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to • Never place or install floor mats or other floor
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
secured to prevent them from moving and interinoperable.
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! Power Convertible Top — If Equipped . . . . . . . 76
▫ Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Lowering The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Raising The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Proceure . . . . . 78 ! BLUE&ME™ Hands-Free Communication — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Wind Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ The Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
! Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 81
▫ Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . .
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
. 84
. 84
. 85
. 91
. 92
3
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 101
▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Ez Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . 102
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 104
! To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ! Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 105
! Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ! Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 108
▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ! Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
! Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ! Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ! Cigar Lighter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Rear Park Assist Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ! Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ! Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . 115
▫ Glove Box Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . 115
▫ Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped . . . . . 125
! Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ! Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ! Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the • The power top buttons will operate when the ignition
power convertible top switch is located on the overhead
switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position.
console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger
• The power top can be remotely operated with the key
side button, which is used to open the power top, and the
fob. Refer to %Opening Power Top Remote Function% in
driver side button, which is used to close the power top.
%Things To Know Before Starting% for more information.
Lowering The Power Top
Auto Open
Push the top open button approximately one second for
the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top
open button for approximately one second a second time
to fully open the convertible top.
Manual Open
For manual open, push and hold the open button until
desired roof position or until spoiler position.
Power Convertible Top Switch
NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/
close mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
Raising The Power Top
Auto close
From the convertible top fully open position, push the
top close button for approximately one second for the
three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close
button for approximately one second a second time for
the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close
button to fully close convertible top.
Manual Close
For manual close, push and hold the close button until
desired position until one-quarter open position. Push
and hold again for full close position.
NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000
cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for information.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicles interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
3
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all
times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are
ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure
If your power convertible top does not operate in the
Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/
closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open
comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top
function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary.
1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed.
2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using
manual mode).
3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully
open position.
4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an additional three seconds.
5. Release the OPEN button.
6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully
closed position.
7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top
begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED
button.
At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the
fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success- Wind Stop
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.
ful.
The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operaAuto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid
tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.
operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top
Function will be functional.
NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity.
If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the
procedure a second time.
3
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
3
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
mirror, press the mirror select switch to either the L (left)
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
door trim panel.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select
switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
Folding Mirrors
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Spotter Mirror
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors.
3
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION —
IF EQUIPPED
Overview
Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a personal telematic system enabling you to use communication and entertainment applications expressly designed
for use in the car.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is
equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and
media player, and it is preset for future installation of
additional services.
The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice
commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunction display messages, gives you the possibility of interacting with your Bluetooth# wireless technology mobile
phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without
having to take your eyes off the road or remove your
hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
you are not required to train the voice recognition system
to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is
nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the
voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent”
type.
The Hands-Free Kit
The basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice
recognition with Bluetooth# wireless technology. With
this system you can make and receive calls safely and
securely by using either voice commands or buttons on
the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving
With this system you can also play your favorite music
condition without ever having to take your eyes off the
stored on USB device and select tracks and playback
road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as
modes with both voice commands or buttons on the
required by current laws.
steering wheel.
Bluetooth# wireless technology enables wireless connecThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules
tion between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit
subject to the following two conditions:
installed on your car.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth# wireless
• This device must accept all interference received, technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit
including interference that may cause undesired gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your
operation.
mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device
does not feature this capability. You can also interact with
3
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
your mobile phone manually and visually using the For further details on the mobile phones supported by
steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi- BLUE&ME™, refer to section BLUE&ME™ SUPPORTED
function display.
MOBILE PHONES.
To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with
voice recognition, you have to simply pair your
Bluetooth# wireless technology enabled mobile phone
with the system.
Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once.
1 — Mute/ESC
4 — Voice Recognition (VR)
2 — Phone/Main
3 — Phone Hang Up
NOTE:
• During the mobile phone pairing procedure,
BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped
with Bluetooth# wireless technology within range and
then establishes the connection using a Personal Identification Number (PIN).
• Once your phone is paired, you have the option to
transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free
kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to (LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK ) and the media
answer a call and also to answer another incoming player. To activate settings when travelling you can only
use voice commands.
phone call.
• To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the The hands-free kit enables the following operations:
buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
• Contact Calling By Voice — you can call a contact in
With voice recognition, you can perform system funcyour mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You
tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as
can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning
“keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword,
through the entries on the multifunction display. (To
it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice
use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone
recognition is an easy and convenient way to use
contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook).
BLUE&ME™.
• Digit Dialing By Voice — you can dial a phone
All the system functions are available within the
number by pressing the VR button on the steering
BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving,
wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed.
you can scroll through the complete menu by using either
the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands. • To Call The SMS Text Sender — call directly the last
SMS text sender or the sender of a message received
When you are travelling, you can interact with
and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox.
BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel
or voice commands relevant only to phone functions
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To Answer A Call — you can answer an incoming call After you place your mobile phone in the car environby pressing the MAIN/Phone button on the steering ment and create a pairing relationship with
BLUE&ME™, you can make phone calls by speaking
wheel.
keywords or pressing buttons on the steering wheel.
• Conference Call — you can call another contact while
When using the hands-free phone, the audio output of a
you are engaged in a phone conversation (with
phone conversation is heard through your car sound
Bluetooth# phones supporting this option).
speakers.
• Call Waiting — while engaged in a phone conversaMessage Reader
tion, you can receive notification of another incoming
The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic
phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and
reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts
switch between two ongoing phone conversations.
you receive on your Bluetooth# wireless technology
(Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compatmobile phone that are received when the phone is paired
ible mobile phones).
and connected to BLUE&ME™ system. It does not pro• Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call — you can vide access to messages that were received before you
refuse an incoming call or end a current call by entered the car and connected with the BLUE&ME™
pressing the Phone Hang-up button on the steering system. The message reader will also interpret any abwheel.
breviation and emoticon contained in the SMS text.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text • To read the messages received and stored. Messages
message reader function or automatic phonebook transcan be read multiple times.
fer via Bluetooth#. Consult www.fiatusa.com for further
• To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the
information on the list of compatible mobile phones.
steering wheel or voice commands.
Message reader functions are managed by the control
• To delete individual messages or the entire inbox
buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™
using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice
voice commands.
commands.
The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following
The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read
operations:
abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I
• To display on the instrument panel multifunction love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-)
display a visual notification signal indicating that you will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write
have received a new SMS text on your Bluetooth# SMS texts.
wireless technology mobile phone, with sender’s
Media Player
number/name; BLUE&ME™ will also ask whether to
With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play, via the
read you the message that has been received.
car sound system, the digital audio files stored on a USB
• To manage the list of SMS texts received on your device by simply connecting it to the USB port located in
BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone.
the glove box of the car.
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In this way, while you are driving you can play your NOTE:
• The media player does not support audio files comfavorite personal music collections.
pressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Right
• iPod# Player — see dedicated paragraph under Media
Management) protected audio files. Non-supported
Player Functions.
audio files that may be present on the USB device will
The media player enables the following operations:
be ignored.
• Digital Audio Playback — you can play all your • To use the media player, you have to simply connect
digital audio files (.mp3,.wma,.wav,.aac) or play a
(directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to
customized playlist (.m3u or. wpl format).
the car USB port. Turning the ignition key to ON,
BLUE&ME™ will start building your media library. At
• Audio File Selection By Category — you can play all
the end of this operation you can surf the whole
audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or
library and scroll its categories as required using the
genre.
buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
• Playback Options — while playing tracks you can
BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection via the car
select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track,
sound system.
Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other serious
consequences; for this reason certain functions
shall be disabled by the BLUE&ME™ system until
driving conditions are secure and, if required, only
when the car is stopped.
• Read and Follow Instructions: before using your
system, read and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this “User’s Guide”. Not
following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
• Keep the User’s Guide in the car: when kept in the
car, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the system.
Please make certain that before using the system
for the first time, all persons have access to the
User’s Guide and read its instructions and safety
information carefully.
(Continued)
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Adjusting Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
the floor.
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline
lever, lean back until the desired position has been
reached, and release the lever.
3
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the
release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback,
dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward
to allow access in and out of the rear seat.
Height Adjuster
EZ Entry Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to the seat back memory being set only – The track will then
be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posiits locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to
Memory Feature
reestablish memory function option 1), the seat has to be
The driver seat also has a memory feature, which can
returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track
operate in two ways:
position as described in Memory function option 1).
Memory Function Option 1) — Full Seat Back And
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
position they were most recently adjusted to. This is
located on the center instrument panel area.
accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its
last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is
Press the switch once to turn on the heated
returned upright.
seats. Press the switch a second time to shut the
heating elements off.
Memory Function Option 2) — Seat Back Only
Memory:
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first
within two to five minutes.
be returned upright prior to going back to the last
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted before operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with
the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
Head Restraints
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push position, see your authorized dealer immediately.
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
downward on the head restraint.
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
their normal position following a rear impact. If the button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
Push Button
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your To open the hood, two latches must be released.
Vehicle” for information on tether routing.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located
on the left kick panel, rearward.
Rear Head Restraint
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop
hood, near the center, and raise the hood.
rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Safety Latch Location
Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left side
when standing in front of the hood) of the engine
compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of
hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Operation
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to turn on
the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beams until the
lever is released.
The DRL function can be turned on or off using the
display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or downward to signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to
indicate the operation of the turn signal.
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when
the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is
returned to a straight position.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Turn Signal Operation
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
There are four different modes of operation that can be
Position).
activated in this position:
Using the switch on the left overhead, press the switch to
• When one door is opened a 3 minute timer is activated.
the right from its center position and the lights are always
on. Press the switch to the left from its center position and • When the key is removed from the ignition (within
the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center
two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a
position, and the lights are turned on and off when the
10 second timer is activated.
doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side
• When the doors are unlocked with Key Fob a 10 secof the overhead console controls the map or reading
ond timer is activated.
function of the lights. Press the switch to the right to turn
on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights
on the left light.
will turn off.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
• When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Fog Light Switch
Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Press
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Windshield Wiper Operation
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent Front Windshield Washer Operation
but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease. steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
Low Speed
released.
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
CAUTION!
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield
Rear Wiper Operation
wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operin the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at
Low Speed and return to normal operation when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and
hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers
will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever
is released.
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls.
Tilt Control Lever
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
Speed Control Buttons
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
NOTE:
In
order
to ensure proper operation, the Elec(40 km/h).
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
right side of the steering wheel.
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
vehicle set speed.
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
To Activate
operate at the selected speed.
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
Indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned button.
off when not in use.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
WARNING!
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed
You could lose control and have an accident. Always memory.
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
increase until the button is released, then the new set the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indicavehicle set speed.
tion of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this system and
moderate hills is normal.
recommendations.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance
Control.
from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear
is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist 12 in (30 cm) away.
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the car during the parking
maneuver.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System.
SIGNAL
Obstacle Distance
Failure
MEANING
INDICATION
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that inAn obstacle is present within the creases as the distance decreases.
sensors’ field of view
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm)
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to
“Menu Functions” for further information).
Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
Sensor or System failures
• Message is displayed on multifunction
display (where provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condimuted.
tion occurs for the external sensors, the signal is cut off
after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers
The audible signal is cut out immediately if the distance
parallel to walls).
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system
is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the
instrument panel warning icon.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
is displayed on the multifunction display (if
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument Park Assist System Usage Precautions
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indior other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
system operating properly.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
disabled. The system is turned off automatically.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead
console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
To Open
Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Press the switch a second time and
hold for approximately one second and release, the
sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
for approximately one second after the reversal occurs.
This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed
position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
To Close
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occursunroof button and hold it for approximately one second,
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
switch a second time and hold for approximately one
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
second to completely close the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Pinch Protect Override
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents the
sunroof from closing, press the switch forward and hold
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box.
There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening
at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a
hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert
the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the
desired location.
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade press the tab and move the
shade to a full open position.
Manual Sun Shade
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet,
located in the floor console, for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
Power Outlet
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo- floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
STORAGE
Passenger Seat Storage — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
Glove Box Compartment
front passenger seat. Pull outward on the latch to open
The glove box is located on the right side of the instruthe storage compartment.
ment panel. Pull outward on the door latch to open the
glove box. Push the glove box door upward to close it.
Passenger Seat Storage
Glove Box Compartment
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area.
When returning the seatback to its upright position, push
rearward until the seatback is properly latched.
Rear Seat Release Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes.
To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Folded Rear Seats
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster.
An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
! Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
! Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
! Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
! Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 144
▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ EVIC Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . 149
! Sales Code (RAB) Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Functions And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Sirius# Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . 178
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ CD MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
! iPod#/USB/Media Player Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
! Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
! CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
! Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 189
! Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 190
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Side Vent
— Multifunction Lever – Light Control
— Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights
— Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer
— Central Air Vents
— Storage Compartment/Radio
7 — Passenger Air Bag
8 — Glove Compartment
9 — Rear Defrost Button
10 — Hazard Button
11 — Climate Controls
12 — Power Windows Control
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Storage Compartment
Shift Lever
Sport Button
Horn/Driver Airbag
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
2. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
1. Glow Plug Light — If Equipped
window defroster. This indicator will illuminate
The Glow Plug light will flash during engine oil
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
viscosity sensor measurement in cold weather.
defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
During this measurement (up to 10 seconds), the starter
will be disabled. If the measured oil viscosity is OK, the
CAUTION!
light will turn off and the engine will be allowed to crank.
If the measured oil viscosity is too high, engine cranking Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
will be disabled and the light will blink repeatedly until the heating elements:
the oil temperature is raised, preferably by an externally- • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
powered electric engine block heater (available from
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
your authorized dealer).
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
The message %Plug In Engine Heater%, will be displayed
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature
after soaking with warm water.
is below 5°F (-15°C) at the time the engine is shut off as • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abraa reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
start.
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
4
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
long the function remains active. For further information,
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog refer to “Follow Me Home” in “Understanding The
lights are on.
Features of Your Vehicle”.
7. Turn Signal Indicators
4. Low Fuel Light
The arrows will flash in unison with the exteWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0 galrior turn signal, when using the turn signal
lon (3.8L) this light will turn on, and remain on
lever.
until fuel is added.
5. High Beam Indicator
8. Generic Warning Light
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerany of the following conditions occur: Oil
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator / Follow Me Home
Intervention, Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor
(Headlight Delay) Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park Failure.
lights or headlights are turned on. If the Follow
Me Home feature is activated this indicator
will illuminate and the EVIC will show how
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
9. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
10. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
This indicator shows that the Speed Control the charging system light remains on, it means that the
system is on.
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
RUN, this light will turn on if the driver’s seat belt
is unbuckled, a chime will sound. When driving, if
the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
4
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Power Steering System Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
14. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
16. Automatic Gearbox Failure
This light will illuminate when there is an
automatic transmission fault.
17. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBDII, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF/LOCK
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
19. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The engine coolant temperature indicator
will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold.
4
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
WARNING!
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to dangerous. You could have a collision. Have the
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for vehicle checked immediately.
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
20. Brake Warning Light
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
This light monitors various brake functions,
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
including brake fluid level and parking brake
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
application. If the Brake Warning Light turns
on it may indicate that the parking brake is Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is turning the ignition switch from the OFF/LOCK position
a problem with the brake system reservoir.
to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on conapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- tinuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
tion.
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on,
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
problem diagnosed and corrected.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
NOTE:
21. Electronic Stability Control OFF (ESC OFF)
• The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation/
Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Coneach time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
driver.
system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
22. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation /
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
Malfunction Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
Light in the instrument cluster will come on for
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
four seconds when the ignition switch is
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the ESC
4
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
25. Temperature Gauge
The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
24. Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors or the trunk may be ajar.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If all the segments of the
temperature gauge are lit, pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If you hear continuous chimes, turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealership for service.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaIf the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
CAUTION!
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the
“Cooling System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
26. Odometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle
cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and
Information Center (EVIC) Display Area
“Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic
been driven.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).”
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
(EVIC)” for further information.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
4
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door
is located on the right side of the vehicle. When the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the digital
scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE: The fuel gauge and range will not immediately
update accurately when refueling with the engine on.
28. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
29. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
4
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Displays
EVIC Display Automatic Transmission
EVIC Display Manual Transmission
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Temperature Indicator
Fuel Level Gauge
Clock
Odometer
Sport Mode
6 — Message Display
7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge
8 — Digital Speedometer
9 — Ice Warning Indicator
10 — Gear Shift Indicator (GSI)
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Ice Warning Indicator
Temperature Indicator
Fuel Level Gauge
Clock
Odometer
6 — Message Display
7 — Coolant Temperature Gauge
8 — Digital Speedometer
9 — Autostick# Gear Indicator
10 — Auto/Sport/ECO Indicator
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
EVIC Control Buttons
Press the MENU ESC button briefly to access the menu
and/or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu
option. Press and hold the MENU ESC button (approximately one second) to return to the main screen.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers
covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a
few seconds.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Press the + button to scroll upward through the dis- Setup Menu
played menu and the related options or to increase the The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Press the + and – buttons to access the different
displayed value.
options and settings (setup).
Press the – button to scroll downward through the
displayed menu and the related options or to decrease The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MENU
ESC button. Single presses on buttons + or – will scroll
the value displayed.
through the setup menu options. The menu includes the
NOTE: Buttons + and – activate different functions
following functions:
according to the following situations:
• Speed Beep
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• Trip B Data
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
• Set Time
4
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Date
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
• Speed Display
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to select the main
menu option to set.
• See Radio
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Button Volume
• Daylights (D.R.L.)
• Hill Start
• Exit Menu
2. Press the + or – button (by single presses) to select the
new setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to store the new
setting and go back to the main menu option previously
selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to display the
first submenu option.
2. Press the + or – button (by single presses) to scroll
through all the submenu options.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to select the indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
setup menu.
4. Press the + or – button (by single presses) to select the Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
new setting for this submenu option.
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to store the new
release the MENU/ESC button. To reset the oil change
setting and go back to the previously selected submenu
indicator system (after performing the scheduled mainoption.
tenance), refer to the following procedure.
6. Press and hold the MENU ESC button to return to the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.(Do not
main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
start the engine.)
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Computer
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 99.59
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa(99 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset autotion such as; trip information, range, fuel consumption,
matically.
average speed and travel time).
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
Trip Button
system.
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infordescribed values.
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
• A short button press displays the different values.
reset.
• A long button press resets the system and then starts a Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, press and hold the TRIP button for
new trip.
over one second to reset.
New Trip
To reset:
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
• Press and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
been displayed or hold the MENU ESC button for longer
manually.
than one second.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the • Average consumption B
menu screen or press and hold the MENU ESC (approxi• Average speed B
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
• Travel time B (driving time).
storing settings.
Trip Functions
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cantrip).
not be reset.
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
Values Displayed
• Trip distance A
Range
This indicates the distance which may be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Average consumption
• Instant consumption A
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time).
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
4
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving Travel Time
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
Features)
Distance Travelled
Dimmer
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable
Average Consumption
of detecting environmental light conditions and adjustThis value shows the approximate average consumption ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly.
since the last reset.
NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may
Instant Consumption
change while travelling following an event that causes
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con- switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.).
Average Speed
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func1. Press the + or – button to set the required brightness
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
NOTE: Selection is possible between 20 and 125 mph or
km/h, depending on the selected unit. The setting will
increase/decrease by five units each time the +/– button
is pressed. Press and hold the +/– button to increase/
decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly
Speed Beep (Speed Limit)
pressing the button when you approach the required
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit
setting.
(mph or km/h); when this limit is exceeded the driver is
• Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
immediately alerted.
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The display will
show the message (Speed Beep).
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
2. Press the + or – button to select speed limit activation
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” will flash
(On) or deactivation (Off).
on the display.
3. When the function is activated (On), briefly press the
2. Press the – button. “Off” will flash on the display.
MENU ESC button to display the presently set activation
speed. Pressing the + or – buttons selects the speed limit.
Press MENU ESC to confirm selection.
2. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
menu screen or press and hold the MENU ESC (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
4
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the Set Time (Clock)
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button This function may be used to set the clock through two
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen sub-menu items: “Time” and “Mode.”
without storing the settings.
Proceed as follows:
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The display will
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or show the two sub-menu items “Time” and “Mode.”
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
2. Press the + or – button to navigate the two sub-menu
For further information see “Trip Computer.”
items.
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
3. Select the required option and then press the MENU
ESC button.
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” or “Off”
will flash on the display (according to previous setting). 4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly
press the MENU ESC button and “hours” will flash on
2. Press the + or – button to select the setting.
the display.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the 5. Press the + or – button for setting.
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
6. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “minutes”
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
will flash on the display.
without storing the settings.
7. Press the + or – button for setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
NOTE:
• The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each
time the + or – button is pressed. Press and hold the
button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save
the setting by briefly pressing the button when you
approach the required setting.
Set Date
This function may be used to set the date (day - month year).
To change the date proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “year” will
flash on the display.
• Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the
“Time” sub-function.
2. Press the + or – button for setting.
• When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly press 3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “month” will
the MENU ESC button. The previously set display flash on the display.
format will flash on the display.
4. Press the + or – button for setting.
• Press the + or – button to select “24h” or “12h.”
5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button and “day” will
When you have selected the required settings, briefly flash on the display.
press the MENU ESC button to go back to the Time,
6. Press the + or – button for setting.
Mode sub-menu screen, or press and hold the MENU
ESC button (approximately one second) to go back to the NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit
main screen without storing the settings.
each time the + or – button is pressed. Press and hold the
4
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
+ or – button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly. To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you info displaying proceed as follows:
approach the required setting.
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button “On” or “Off”
• Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the will flash on the display (according to the previous
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button setting).
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
2. Press the + or – button for setting.
screen without storing the settings.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
See Radio (Repeat Audio Information)
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
mation relevant to the sound system.
without storing the settings.
• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning
If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate
activation or AutoSTore.
“BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information.
• CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
Speed Display
When this function is activated the cluster will display
the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display
feature, proceed as follows:
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button “On” or “Off”
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “MPH”, “km/ will flash on the display (according to the previous
h”, then “Off” will flash on the display (according to setting).
previous setting).
2. Press the + or – button for setting.
2. Press the + or – button to select display deactivation
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
“Off”, “MPH” or “km/h”.
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button without storing the settings.
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
Units (Set Units)
screen.
This function may be used to set the measurement unit in
Autoclose
three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel
With this function active, the doors will automatically Economy.”
lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
(24 km/h).
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to display the
three sub-menus.
4
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press the + or – button to navigate the three sub- If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will
menus.
be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly press 1. Press the + or – button for setting.
the MENU ESC button.
2. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the
4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu: briefly press sub-menu.
the MENU ESC button. Either “mi” or “km” will appear
3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly
on the display (according to the previous setting).
press the MENU ESC button. Either “°F” or “°C” will
5. Press the + or – button for setting.
appear on the display (according to the previous setting).
6. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the 4. Press the + or – button for setting.
sub-menu.
5. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the
7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly sub-menu.
press the MENU ESC button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or
When you have made the required settings, briefly press
“l/100km” will appear on the display (according to the
the MENU ESC button to go back to the sub-menu
previous setting).
screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button (apIf the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will proximately one second) to go back to the main screen
be displayed in “mpg.”
without storing the settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
Language (Selecting The Language)
The messages can be displayed in the following lan1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The previously
guages: Italian, English, German, Portuguese, Spanish,
set volume “level” will flash on the display.
French, Dutch, Polish.
2. Press the + or – button for setting.
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The previously
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
set “language” will flash on the display.
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
2. Press the + or – button for setting.
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment)
This function may be used to adjust the volume of the
beep accompanying the buttons. MENU ESC , + or – can
be adjusted according to 8 levels.
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompanying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to
one of eight volume levels.
To adjust the volume, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. The previously
set volume “level” will flash on the display.
2. Press the + or – button for setting.
4
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the 3. Press the + or – button for setting.
menu screen, or press and hold the MENU ESC button
4. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen
menu screen, or press and hold the button (approxiwithout storing the settings.
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing the settings.
Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R.
Indication)
Hill Start Assist
This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop
Automobiles Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R.
on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of
system.
brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
time after the foot has been removed from the brake
This function may be used to activate / deactivate the pedal.
Daytime Running Lamps.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” or “Off”
1. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to display the will flash on the display (according to previous setting).
three sub-menus.
2. Press the + or – button for setting.
2. Briefly press the MENU ESC button. “On” or “Off”
will flash on the display (according to previous setting).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
3. Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO
menu screen, or press and hold the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing the settings.
Exit Menu
This function closes the initial menu screen.
Briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the
main screen.
Press the – button to return to the first menu option
(Speed Beep).
Press the + button to return to the last menu option
(Daylights).
Introduction
The radio has been designed according to the specifications of the passenger compartment, with a personalized
design to match the style of the dashboard.
4
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate
“BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information.
The instructions for use are given below and we recommend you to read them carefully.
Suggestions
WARNING!
Having the volume turned up high can cause the
driver to no be able to hear important traffic sounds,
i.e. sirens, horns, etc. This could cause an accident.
Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear
background noises.
Road Safety
Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g.
Care And Maintenance
store stations) before beginning to drive.
Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning
Reception Conditions
and polishing products could damage the surface.
Reception conditions change constantly while driving.
CDs
Reception may be interfered with by the presence of
The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs
mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far
could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is
away from the broadcaster.
playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these
guidelines:
• Only use branded CDs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
• Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger • The use of original CD media is required for the best
marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the
quality audio production. Correct operation is not
outside and clean them from the middle outwards.
guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were
not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity
• Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or
above 650 Mb.
sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface
• Do not use commercially available protective sheets
of the CDs.
for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get
• After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes
stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc.
to prevent them from being damaged.
• If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few
• Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperaseconds before the system starts to play it. The CD
tures or moisture for long periods.
player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected
• Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the
discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being
recorded surface with pencils or pens.
copied is often shown in very small letters or is
difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may
• Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed,
be, for example, “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY PROdistorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in
TECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A
malfunctions or damage to the player.
PC/MAC”.
4
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The CD player is capable of reading most compression With Bose# Premium Audio system (if equipped):
systems currently in use, following the development
• Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers.
of these systems, the reading of all compression for• Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars.
mats is not guaranteed.
Technical Specifications
The complete system consists of:
• Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each
of the rear side panels.
• Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one •
speaker in each of the front doors.
•
• Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in
•
each of the front pillars.
•
• Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker
in each of the rear side panels.
• Antenna on the car roof.
• Radio with CD/MP3 player.
A subwoofer under the right front seat.
An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel.
Antenna on the car roof.
Radio with CD/MP3 player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Quick Guide
Radio Controls
BUTTON
TUNER
A-B-C
MEDIA
BUTTON
(Mute/Pause Button)
AUDIO
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
On
Off
AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source selection
Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM,
SAT (if equipped)
CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped
and present) source selection
MODE
Short button press
Long button press
Short repeated button press
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/
Pause)
Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS),
high tones (TREBLE), left/right balance
(BALANCE), front/rear balance
(FADER)
MODE
Short button press
Short repeated button press
Short repeated button press
Menu activation: short button press
Adjustment type selection: press
or
Adjustment of values: press
or
4
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BUTTON
(Information Button)
MENU
+Vol/–Vol
BUTTON
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
MODE
Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist,
Folder information (if available) in CD,
Media Player and Satellite (if so
equipped); Toggles RBDS information
in FM
Advanced functions adjustment
Menu activation: short button press
Adjustment type selection: press
or
Adjustment of values: press
or
Volume adjustment
Press + button: volume increase Press –
button: volume decrease
RADIO FUNCTIONS
Radio Station Search:
• Automatic Search
• Manual Search
MODE
Automatic search: press buttons
or
(long press for fast forward)
Manual search: press buttons
or
(long press for fast forward)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
BUTTON
12345
RADIO FUNCTIONS
Current radio station storing
Stored station recall
BUTTON
CD FUNCTIONS
CD ejection
Previous/next track play
CD track fast forward/rewind
Previous/next folder play (for CD-MP3)
General Information
The radio offers the following functions:
Radio Section
• PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW frequency bands
• RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
• Automatic/manual station tuning
MODE
Long button press for memory preset 1
to 5 respectively
Short button press for memory preset 1
to 5 respectively
MODE
Short button press
Short button press
Long button press
Short button press
• FM Multipath detector
or
or
or
• Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40
stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band
(5 on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band
(5 on AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if
equipped (5 on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC)
4
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable automatic volume adjustment depending on the car speed
• Automatic Stereo/Mono selection
CD Section
• Track selection (forward/backward)
• Fast forward/rewind through tracks
WARNING!
On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are
data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause
hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety
as well as causing damage to the final stages and the
speakers.
CD/MP3 Section
• CD Display function: display of track number and on
mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since • MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG)
start of the track
• Folder selection (previous/next)
• Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW
• Track selection (forward/backward)
• Fast forward/rewind through tracks
• MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the
track, name of the file
• Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit
is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it
had been set higher when previously used.
Audio Section
• Mute/pause function
• Soft mute function
• Loudness function
Turning The Car Radio Off
Press and hold (approximately 2 seconds) the
(ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off.
• Separate bass/treble tone adjustment
Selecting The Radio Functions
By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly,
the following audio sources can be selected cyclically:
• Front/rear fader
• AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped)
• Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped)
• Right/left channel balancing
Functions And Adjustments
Turning The Car Radio On
The car radio comes on when the
is pressed briefly.
(ON/OFF) button
Selecting The CD Function
By briefly pressing the MEDIA button, the CD audio
source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded).
Volume Adjustment
To adjust the volume, press the buttons +Vol or –Vol to
increase/decrease the volume.
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mute/Pause Function
Press the
button briefly to activate the MUTE
function. The volume will gradually decrease and the
wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display
(in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode).
display will show the Bass level value for the source
activated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will
show the wording “FM Bass +2”).
Use the buttons
or
to scroll through the Menu
functions. To change the setting of the selected function,
button again to deactivate the MUTE use the
or
buttons.
Press the
function. The volume will gradually increase until it
The current status of the selected function appears on the
reaches the previously set level.
display.
When the volume level is changed using the dedicated
The functions managed by the Audio Menu are:
controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the vol• BASS (Bass adjustment)
ume is adjusted to the new level selected.
Audio Adjustment
• TREBLE (Treble adjustment)
The functions that can be selected from the audio menu
• BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment)
change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/
• FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment)
SATELLITE.
Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio • LOUDNESS
deactivation)
functions. After the AUDIO button is first pressed, the
(Loudness
function
activation/
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
• EQUALIZER — if equipped (activation and selection Balance Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
of factory equalization adjustments)
• USER EQUALIZER — if equipped (customized equal- 1. Press AUDIO button.
ization adjustment)
or
button to set “Balance” in the
2. Press the
Tone Adjustment
AUDIO menu.
Proceed as follows:
button to increase the sound from the
3. Press the
button to increase the sound from
1. Press AUDIO button.
left speakers or the
the right speakers.
or
button to select “Bass” or
2. Press the
“Treble” in the AUDIO menu.
or
buttons briefly, the levels will
By pressing the
change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the
or
button or to increase/decrease
3. Press the
levels will change quickly.
the bass or treble adjustments.
Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs
or
buttons briefly, the levels will
By pressing the
at the same level.
change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the
levels will change quickly.
4
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fader Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Press AUDIO button.
2. Press the
AUDIO menu.
or
button to set “Fader” in the
Loudness Function — If Equipped
The Loudness function improves the volume of the
sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass
and treble.
To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loudness” setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the
button to increase the sound coming function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few
3. Press the
button to increase the seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness
from the rear speakers or the
sound coming from the front speakers.
Off”.
or
buttons briefly, the levels will Preset/User*/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If
By pressing the
change progressively. By pressing them down longer, the Equipped
The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated.
levels will change quickly.
When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can
Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs
only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble”
at the same level.
settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic
curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select
the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button or to 3. Use
or
buttons to select %EQ User.%
select one of the adjustments:
4. Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer.
• “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can
5. On the display a 7 bar graph will appears, in which
be changed by the user)
each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be
• “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music adjusted by using the
or
buttons. The selected
or
sound)
bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using
buttons.
• “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop
music sound)
6. To store the setting, press the MENU or AUDIO
buttons.
• “Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound)
Menu
When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the
MENU Button Functions
wording “EQ” lights up.
Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu
*User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped
function.
To set a personalized equalizer adjustment:
or
buttons to scroll through the menu
Use the
1. Press AUDIO button.
functions. To change the setting of the selected function,
or
buttons to set EQ function.
or
buttons.
2. Use the
use the
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The current status of the selected function appears on the Speed Volume Function — If Equipped
This function automatically adapts the volume level to
display.
the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the
The functions managed by the Menu are:
speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level
• Speech Volume
inside the passenger compartment. To activate/
deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording
• Aux Audio Offset
“Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the
• Radio Off
current status of the function:
• Sat ID
• Off: function deactivated
• System Reset
• High: function activated (high sensitivity)
• SIRIUS# Telephone Number
• Speed Volume
• On Volume Limit
Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function.
• Low: function activated (low sensitivity)
On Volume Limit
This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the
maximum volume limit when turning the radio on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
The display shows the function status:
NOTE:
• Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the
• “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on
activation/deactivation of the function and not the
the volume level will be:
minimum or maximum volume value.
− If the volume level is equal to or higher than the
• If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be
maximum value, the radio will come on at the maxiadjusted between the minimum and the maximum
mum volume.
level.
− If the volume level is between the minimum and
Radio Off Function
maximum values, the radio will come on at the same
This function makes it possible to set the radio switching
volume as before it was switched off.
off mode by choosing between two methods.
− If the volume level is equal to or lower than the
The chosen mode appears on the display:
minimum value, the radio will come on at the mini• “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connecmum volume.
tion with the ignition key; the radio is turned auto• “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the
matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP
same volume as before it was switched off. The
position.
volume level can be between 0 and 40.
Use the buttons
or
to change the setting.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off indepen- Radio
dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for
(Tuner) Introduction
a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has
When the car radio is turned on, the last function that
been turned to the STOP position.
was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3,
System Reset Function
AUX) is activated.
This function is used to restore all settings to the factory
To select the Radio function when another audio source is
values. The options are:
being listened to, briefly press the TUNER button.
• NO — No restore intervention.
Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will
• YES — The default parameters will be restored. Dur- show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of
ing such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears the selected radio station, the frequency band selected
on the display. At the end of the operation, the source (e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1).
does not change and the previous situation will be
Frequency Band Selection
displayed.
With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner
button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired reception band.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Each time the button is pressed the following bands are By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds,
the tuned station will be stored. Pressing the A-B-C
selected cyclically:
button will change between the preset memory group in
• AM, FM or SAT (if equipped)
the current frequency band.
Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings
Automatic Tuning
on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station
Briefly press the
or
button to start the automatic
selected on the respective frequency band.
tuning search for the next station that can be received in
Preset Buttons
the selected direction.
The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the
or
button is pressed for longer, the rapid
If the
following pre-selections:
search is started. When the button is released, the tuner
• 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC
will stop on the next station that can be received.
• 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB)
Manual Tuning
This is used to manually search for stations in the
• 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC)
preselected band.
To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency
Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly
band and then briefly press the corresponding preset
or
button to start the search
and repeatedly the
button (from 1 to 5).
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
in the desired direction. If the
or
button is SIRIUS# Satellite Radio
pressed longer, the fast search starts and then stops when With over 130 channels, SIRIUS# Satellite Radio brings
you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100%
the button is released.
commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports,
Stereophonic Broadcasters
news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game,
If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is
every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The bigautomatically switched from Stereo to Mono.
gest and most compelling names in talk with Howard
SIRIUS$ Satellite Radio — If Equipped
Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with
Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus
Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped
kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and
The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof
weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast
of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the
coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on
roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line
SIRIUS. A one-year SIRIUS# Satellite Radio subscription
of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance.
is included. SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos
Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the
are trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsidantenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or
iaries. SIRIUS Radio requires a subscription, sold sepaabove the antenna.
rately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SIRIUS
and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Terms & Conditions available at sirius.com/service
terms. SIRIUS Radio U.S. service only available to those
at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States,
D.C., and PR. Service available in Canada; see
www.siriuscanada.ca.
You can find SIRIUS’ current terms and conditions at
http://www.sirius.com.
Re-Subscribe To SIRIUS# Satellite Radio
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS# Satellite Radio with
SIRIUS# Satellite Radio Program Types
their radio. Following expiration of the free services, it
Program Types can be selected by pressing the
or will be necessary to access the information on the Subbuttons. The Program Type will change to the next scription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
category and the radio will then tune to first station in Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu
or
buttons will tune Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the
that program type. Pressing
to only the stations in that program type.
selected Set-up Menu function.
or
buttons until %All% is displayed Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your
Pressing the
will allow normal tuning to all stations.
receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of
SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0.
The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock,
Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are
Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian,
correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered
Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, Entercorrectly, then the SIRIUS subscription will not be able to
tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health,
be transferred to the new radio and will not be active
Religion, Traffic/Weather.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A
your service, either call the number listed on the display Sirius Radio
When a radio needs to be replaced, the dealer will need
or visit the provider online.
the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the
CAUTION!
SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number contains 12 digits.
Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any
The following are instructions for retrieving the Elecerrors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its
tronic Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model
use in vehicles.
radios:
SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are tradeTo retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module
marks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries.
tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is
SIRIUS Radio requires a subscription, sold separately
placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers
after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase.
are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription
Prices and programming are provided by SIRIUS and are
will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and
subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms &
will not be active when installed in the customer’s
Conditions available at sirius.com/service terms. SIRIUS
vehicle.
Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years
of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., & PR.
Visit www.sirius.com
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal
playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using
Introduction
good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed
This chapter describes the operation of the CD player
possible.
only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the
CD Loading/Ejecting
“Functions and Adjustments” chapter.
To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the
CD Player Selection
motorized loading system, which will position it corTo activate the CD player built into the equipment,
rectly.
proceed as follows:
The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition
• Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first
key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will
track will start to play.
remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source
or
listened to before being switched off, will be activated.
CD Player
• If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and
then briefly press the MEDIA button to select the “CD”
function mode. The last track listened to will start to
play.
When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol
“CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain
displayed for the whole time required for the radio to
read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio
automatically starts playing the first track.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the
button with the radio turned on, to activate
the motorized CD ejection system. After ejection, the last
audio source listened to before playing the CD will be
heard.
A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these
functions are over. At the end, with the CD mode
activated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc
error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected.
If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automatically be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not
resume playing until the %MEDIA% button is pressed to
select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last
source prior to CD mode.
Display Information
When the CD player is operating, information will appear on the display with the following meaning:
The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off.
Possible Error Messages
If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been
inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is
a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc
error.”
The CD will then be ejected and the audio source
activated before the CD mode selection will be heard.
• “Track 5” indicates the CD track number.
• “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the
track (if the relevant Menu function is activated).
Track Selection
Briefly press the
button to play the previous CD track
button to play the next track. The tracks are
and the
selected cyclically: the first track is selected after the last
track and vice versa.
If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds,
button, starts the track again from the
pressing the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
beginning. In this case, if you want to play the previous NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed
from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
button twice consecutively.
track, press the
Track Fast Forward/Rewind
Keep the
button pressed down to fast forward the
button pressed down to
selected track and keep the
fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will stop
once the button is released.
MP3 Mode
In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also
enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio
files have been recorded in an MP3 format.
CD MP3 Player
The specifications and operating conditions for playing
MP3 files are the following:
To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use
Pause Function
good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible.
To pause the CD player, press the
button. The
The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that
wording “CD Pause” appears on the display.
create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks
button (folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The
To resume listening to the track, press the
again.
folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected.
Introduction
This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 • The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance
player.
with ISO standard 9660.
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the
“.wma” files with a different extension will not be CD button pressed for more than 2 seconds.
reproduced.
NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may
• The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are: take a few seconds to start playing. While checking the
44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz, disc the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files
are detected, the radio will resume playing the audio
mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s).
session from the point where it was interrupted.
• Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced.
Display Information
NOTE: The track names must not include the following
characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close ID3–Tag Information Display
brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure In addition to the information relating to the time
that the names of the files do not contain these characters; elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also
if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to
Title Track, Artist and Author.
involved.
Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs
If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced,
CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automatically starts playing the audio session. It is possible to
When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen
to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this information has not been recorded for the track played, the text
%UNKNOWN% will be displayed for that field.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Selection Of Next/Previous Folder
• If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in
Press the
button to select a next folder or the
sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single
button to select the previous folder. The display will
level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the
show the number of the folder.
level of the main folders.
The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is Troubleshooting
selected after the last folder and vice versa.
General
If no other folder/track is selected in the next 2 seconds,
Sound Volume Low
the first track on the new folder will be played.
The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F”
At that moment selected the last track in the folder is (front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output
power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level
playing, the next folder will be played.
adjustment is equal to R+9.
Structure Of The Folders
The radio with MP3 player:
Source Can Not Be Selected
Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to
• Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain
be listened to.
MP3 format files
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
The Cd Does Not Play
The CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
The CD is scratched. Try using another CD.
The Cd Can Not Be Loaded
A CD is already loaded. Press the
the CD.
MP3 File Reading
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual”
for further information.
Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) — If
Equipped
button and remove A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is available as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the
Navigation User Guide for further information.
Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files
The CD is scratched or dirty.
The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly
Displayed.
In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of
the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly.
iPod$/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod# or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartment.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
4
1 — iPod# Or External USB Device Holder
2 — Cable Jack
3 — USB Connector
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual
for iPod# or external USB device support capability.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
CD Player Operation
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
each mode.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for
too high.
further information.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
wiping from center to edge.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchby relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
ing the disc.
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
or anti-static sprays.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Temperature Control
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
2. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials and one inner push knob.
3. Recirculation Control
Rotate this control to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
NOTE:
• Panel
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
• Bi-Level
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost and Mix.
• Floor
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
4. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes • Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
window demister outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining 5. A/C Button
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
• Defrost
engaged.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demister outlets. Use this mode with MAX A/C
maximum blower and temperature settings for best For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
windshield and side window defrosting.
modes at the same time.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Operating Tips Chart
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the
driver to select individual comfort settings.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button
Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recirculation automatically. Press and release to select. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to
“Automatic Operation” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
6. Front Defrost
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON. The blower will automatically default to medium-high if the Defrost mode is
selected. Performing this function will cause the ATC to
switch into manual mode.
3. Temperature Control Up Button
Provides temperature up control. Push the button for
warmer temperature settings.
7. Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small
4. Blower Control Up Button
amount flowing through the defrost and side window
There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed increases
demister outlets.
as you press this button. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
8. Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
5. Mix Mode
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side winPerforming this function will cause the ATC to switch
dow demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or
into manual mode.
snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing this aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Blower Control Down Button
• When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation
There are 12 blower speeds. The blower speed decreases
indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If
as you press this button. Performing this function will
the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
setting is manual and Recirculation is on.
Automatic Operation
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Provides temperature down control. Push the button for
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
cooler temperature settings.
Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate when
on.
11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the temperature control
12. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
indicator illuminates when ON.
comfort level.
NOTE:
• When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
flash if pressed. This indicates that you can not pro- not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
ceed to this mode due to fogging risk.
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features”
in this section of the manual.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
There are 12 fixed blower speeds. Use
the blower control up or down buttons
to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you
select. The blower speed increases as
you press or hold the blower control up
button and decreases when you press or
hold the blower control down button.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic Blower Control
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
pressing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan
increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode.
will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds
Manual Operation
are selected. This allows the front occupants to control
This system offers a full complement of manual override
the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
features.
AUTO mode.
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators
by selecting one of the following positions.
illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch into manual mode.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Mix Mode
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off while keeping the windshield clear.
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
Defrost Mode
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
Floor Mode
demister outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of temperature settings for best windshield and side winair is directed through the defrost and side window dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
demister outlets.
blower will automatically default to medium-high.
Bi-Level
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
to prevent fogging of the windows.
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Defrost mode to improve
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disselect Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
abled automatically if this mode is selected.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
DEFROST mode.
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature operation, the air conditioning system performance may be
reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while
in automatic mode.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
obstructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
! Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 207
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 207
! Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 211
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 212
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 212
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
! Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 209 ! AutoStick# — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . 228
! Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
! Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
! Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 232
! Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
! Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
! Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 226
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 227
! Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
! Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 241
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 242
! Tires — General Information
! Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 256
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
! Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 248
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 262
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
! Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 ! Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
! Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 267
! Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 268
! Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . 268
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
STARTING PROCEDURES
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
WARNING!
Never leave children in the vehicle alone. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. The child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. The child could operate
power windows, other controls or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position and
release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the Normal Starting procedure.
5
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cold Weather Operation
If Engine Fails To Start
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
WARNING!
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
engine block heater has not been used. An externallythe vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
powered electric engine block heater is available as
serious personal injury.
optional equipment or from your authorized dealer.
The message %plug in engine heater% will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below
5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder
to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-30 oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important
to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory
starting in cold conditions.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
5
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
Shift Lever
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the
ring under the knob and, at the same time move the
gearshift lever to the right and then backward.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be NOTE:
sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when • Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is moving, can result in transmission damage.
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
• During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant
is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
transmission.
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Recommended Shift Speeds
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
table.
on the clutch.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must
Units In mph (km/h)
be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When
AccelEngine
selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (aperation 1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Size
proximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal
Rate
and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to
Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 38 (61)
1.4L
stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be proCruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
duced, the pause length should be increased.
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Downshifting
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
CAUTION!
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be
overburdened.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Move the shift lever into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not move the shift lever between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make
sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or
in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/
OFF position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
Key Ignition Park Interlock
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interthe PARK position (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK/OFF position.
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
hundred miles (kilometers).
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick# shift control (refer to
“AutoStick#” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information). Moving the shift lever forward or rearward
(–/ +) while in the AutoStick# position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Shift Lever
PARK
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
5
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in
this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the
ignition key in the vehicle. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
5
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick# mode
(described below) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
DRIVE
achieve maximum efficiency. Normal operation will reThis range should be used for most city and highway
sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downsuitable level.
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The Transmission Limp Home Mode
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
tics under all normal operating conditions.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condiin third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
5
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
following steps:
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
AUTOSTICK$ — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick# is a driver-interactive feature providing
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
manual shift control, giving you more control of the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. vehicle. AutoStick# allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
5. Restart the engine.
also provide you with more control during passing, city
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal trailer towing, and many other situations.
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
into a higher gear if the engine speed is too low. An
Operation
audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick# position (to the
selected.
left of the Drive position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
• When coming to a stop, the transmission will downtransmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
shift through the gears based on vehicle speed. When
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and moving it rearward
the vehicle is at a stop, first gear will be selected.
(+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the
• Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in
instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator.
snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear
NOTE: In AutoStick# mode, the transmission will only
after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift lever
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
rearward (+) once or twice.
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as noted below.
AutoStick# is deactivated when the shift lever is moved • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick# is engaged because the transmission will not shift autoout of the AutoStick# (+/-) position.
matically.
General Information
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
• You can launch the vehicle from a stop in first, second,
AutoStick# is engaged.
or third gear. The system will ignore attempts to shift
5
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Acceleration
An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipselected.
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec- erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
• Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually
selected ratio, however:
WARNING!
− If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to a special automatic shift
mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain
cools off.
− If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick# mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
The power steering system is speed sensitive for light
steering effort during slow speed parking maneuvers,
and gradually increases the steering effort as vehicle
speed increases to provide a tighter/more sporty steering
response.
5
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
Parking Brake
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
completely.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave a manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to
do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPORT MODE
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine
response. This driving mode is useful while driving on
twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in
spirited cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button.
SPORT Button
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This
driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads
where more steering precision is desired in spirited
cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button.
5
SPORT Button
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard
driving mode.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example; repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake
use.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
(Continued) brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
5
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
WARNING!
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Start- • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
ing and Operating” for further information.
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailBrake Assist System (BAS)
ing road conditions.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
(Continued)
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
WARNING! (Continued)
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
5
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA Activation Criteria
Disabling/Enabling HSA
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
activate:
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
• Vehicle must be stopped.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
7% grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill.
information.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill This system enhances directional control and stability of
is in REVERSE gear).
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
WARNING!
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
may occur. This could cause a collision with another the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
responsible for braking the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission)
ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission)
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific
reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC
Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to
gain traction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
operation.
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
mode by pressing the switch. Once the situation requiron continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
ing ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
WARNING!
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
will be illuminated. All other stability features of
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC function normally. When in “Partial Off” mode,
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
system is reduced.
5
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel- TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Tire Markings
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa•
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” or
“S”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter %P% is absent from this tire
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
5
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
&....blank....& = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— %R% means radial construction
—%D% means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
&....blank....& = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasgross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
axles must not be exceeded.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and (295 kg) (because 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed [295 kg]).
the weight referenced here.
5
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
(392 kg).
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
5
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
CAUTION!
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in a need
for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, altire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
consumption.
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
which could damage the valve stem.
5
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
the winter.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
and cold tire inflation pressures.
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial-ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial-ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
• Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h).
(Continued)
5
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
• Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the stopping when you are stuck.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel Emergencies” for further information.
on the vehicle at any given time.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 — Worn Tire
to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 — New Tire
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
5
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life Of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including, but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
You could lose control and have an accident resulting that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
in serious injury or death.
specifications or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
5
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Use Security Chain Company (SCC) SCC Z6 low
profile or equivalent chains on 185/55R15 tires
only.
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
0.5 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer, if different from the speed recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
(Continued) chains.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at diagram.
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
5
Tire Rotation
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20°
C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
the tire.
failure or condition.
Base System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
while adjusting your tire pressure.
instrument cluster.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Check Tire Pressure” text message
will display when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Unavailable” text message will display. If the ignition key
is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
wheel and tire assembly.
solid.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni- General Information
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
and then remain on solid.
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
• This device must accept any interference received, Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
including interference that may cause undesired your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
operation.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4 symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the apCanada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4 (Single) propriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis- Reformulated Gasoline
sion regulations and provide satisfactory Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
fuel economy and performance when us- burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spean octane range of 87 to 91. The manufac- cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imturer recommends the use of 91 octane or prove air quality.
higher for optimum performance.
5
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% Ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% Ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher Ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “check engine light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
To recover from a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends using gasoline without MMT. Since the
once with E-85 perform the following:
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
• drain the fuel tank
pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or
not their gasoline contains MMT.
• change the engine oil
It is even more important to look for gasoline without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
• disconnect the battery to reset the engine controller
higher than those allowed in the United States.
long term adaptive memory
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformuMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
lated gasoline.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT In Gasoline
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane numdetergents or other additives is not needed under normal
ber. Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT has been
shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission
• replace the fuel filter and oil filter
5
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of Methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period of time. If
the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short period,
adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may
cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a %clicking%
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
NOTE:
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
tank is full.
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one the problem will turn the MIL off.
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
TRAILER TOWING
tightened.
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not allowed.
5
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Transmission in NEUTRAL
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis- ground.
sion is in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Do not flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will
result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all
drive wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
! Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
! If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
! TIREFIT Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 273 ! Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
! Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped . . . 282
! Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
! Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
6
270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
! Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
! Enhanced Accident Response System
. . . . . . . 301
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
may wear down your battery.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT
Small punctures up to 1/4 in (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located under the front driver’s seat.
4. Power Button
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
5. Mode Select Knob
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position
for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
6
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Selecting Sealant Mode
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sysHose (clear hose) (6) when selecting
tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
this mode.
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
•
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
•
kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use. After each use, always replace
these components immediately at an authorized
dealer.
When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is
only intended to seal punctures less than 1⁄4 in (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
− If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm) or larger.
− If the tire has any sidewall damage.
− If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
− If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
− If the wheel has any damage.
(Continued)
6
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
− If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce
vomiting!
Consult
a
physician
immediately.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the deflated tire.
valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
This will provide the best positioning of the kit when
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
valve stem.
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the
valve stem in this position before proceeding.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition. NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
4. Set the parking brake.
6
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRETIREFIT kit.
FIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if availparking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
able. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white the TIREFIT kit.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the tire.
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. Sealant Hose (6):
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6),
the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when
the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle”.
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
6
280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
position.
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem.
Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire serfurther. Call for assistance.
vice center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door open- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the auing.
thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the TIREFIT service kit.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
6
282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of
it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the
front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in a bag under the
front driver’s seat.
Jack Stowage
6
284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on
cargo area.
the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to
pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area.
Winch Access Plug
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
Spare Tire
6
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. When the spare is clear, remove the knob or plastic 5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
molded nut by rotating it counter-clockwise.
through the center of the wheel.
Plastic Molded Nut
Retainer
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn Off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
6
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
(Continued)
288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the
“Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Operating” for information about the spare tire, it s use, and
operation.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the
driver’s seat.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on
each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding).
Front Jacking Location
6
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
Rear Jacking Location
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
WARNING!
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
4. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
CAUTION!
5. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the
hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the
center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
6
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel bolts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel bolts.
9. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the
bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the bag to
the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the
vehicle.
6. Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone
shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered.
WARNING!
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
8. Finish tightening the bolts. Push down on the wrench 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have
while tightening the wheel bolts. Alternate bolts until the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
each bolt has been tightened twice. The correct wheel bolt
torque is 63 ft lbs (85 N·m) for steel wheels and 75 ft lbs
(100 N·m) for aluminum wheels. If you doubt that you
have tightened the bolts correctly, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpCorrect the tire pressure as required.
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Spare Tire Stowage
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Reverse instructions of the spare removal section.
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed.
precautions.
6
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the battery.
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
the fuel injection system.
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmisyou should have the battery and charging system in- sion) and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinspected at your authorized dealer.
ning the wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control or Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system
OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or 1st gear
(manual transmission) and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission or clutch (manual transmission) overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located
on the right side of the shift lever housing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Automatic Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
CAUTION!
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, push and
hold the override release lever in.
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
6
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Manual Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
• Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
All Transmissions
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON/
RUN position. Make certain the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. A dolly
should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels
are raised. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system (automatic transmission
only). There is a removable plug in the right side of the
shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
override the system. The ignition key must be in the • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
ON/RUN position to use the override lever.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe transmission damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
message %Fuel Cutoff See Handbook% is displayed.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine comENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
the communication network remains intact, and the starting the engine.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the System Reset Procedure
event the ORC will determine whether to have the After an impact causing airbag deployment, the left and
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel
ing functions:
cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned
off.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you
must follow the system reset procedure.
until the ignition key is turned off.
6
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Customer Action
1. Turn ignition OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch Must
be placed in Neutral
State).
2. Turn ignition ON.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Customer Will See
Left Turn Light is OFF.
Right Turn Light BLINKS.
Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
Left Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
Left Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
is ON SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
8. Turn ignition OFF.
Left Turn Light is OFF.
Right Turn Light is OFF.
System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset
procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! Engine Compartment — 1.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
! Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . . 306
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
! Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
! Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
! Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
! Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
7
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 329
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 329
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Convertible Top Care – If Equipped . . . . . . . 336
! Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
! Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
! Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
! Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . 346
! Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
! Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 348
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L
7
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Battery
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Fill
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
not proceed to the I/M station.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
crank or start the engine.
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
7
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-genuine parts for maintenance and repairs
will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
WARNING!
CAUTION!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for
the flushing procedure.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
7
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Checking Oil Level
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
oil temperature could damage your engine.
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Change Engine Oil
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
give you an incorrect reading.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informaabout five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut tion.
off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
whichever occurs first.
Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full
end of the indicator range.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
7
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
Materials Added To Engine Oils
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replaceDo not add any supplemental materials, other than leak ment. The quality of replacement filters varies considerdetection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
engineered product and its performance may be im- most efficient service. MOPAR# engine oil filters are high
paired by supplemental additives.
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, maintenance intervals.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR# engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
7
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR#
oil, or refrigerants.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
Body Lubrication
lock cylinder.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Windshield Wiper Blades
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
MOPAR# Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts and help reduce streaking and smearing.
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
liftgate glass.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
7
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
blade holder.
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
7
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Selection Of Coolant
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
CAUTION!
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) enaccumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
face of the condenser.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolCooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) enmaintenance intervals.
gine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
possible.
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
(Continued)
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR#
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below !34° F (!37° C)
are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionAdding Coolant
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
engine cooling system.
to ten years or 152,000 miles (247 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL
RANGE”.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfacsafely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
month.
7
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezresult in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) pering.
formance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
for leaks.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
maintenance intervals.
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
WARNING!
engine which contains aluminum components.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
condenser clean.
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reremoving the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Mainfluid level up to the requirements described on the brake taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
WARNING!
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
transmission , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
can severely damage your brake system and/or
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
original factory installed hydraulic master cylintransmission clutch release system should not require
der reservoir.
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
(Continued)
7
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
contained within a single housing.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perforFrequency Of Fluid Change
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmisUnder normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informathe vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubrition. It is important that the transmission fluid be maincant has become contaminated with water.
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
7
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- Fluid Level Check
The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
serviced only.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered Fluid And Filter Changes
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- maintenance intervals
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geothey may adversely affect seals.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
CAUTION!
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
the chemicals can damage your transmission compowhich exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR# Car Wash or a mild
What Causes Corrosion?
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
clear water.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR# Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes of corrosion are:
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR#
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR# Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
open.
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR# Total Clean or a mild
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR# Multi-Purpose
heavy soil, use MOPAR# Wheel Cleaner or select a
Cleaner or a high quality cleaner, to a clean, damp
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
remove soap residue.
MOPAR# cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheels’ protective finish.
Interior Care
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Use MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
Equipped
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manUse MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
ner:
upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomwith a clean, dry towel.
mended for leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
7
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR# Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR# Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do Instrument Panel Bezels
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
CAUTION!
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
When installing hanging air fresheners in your venot spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Instrument Panel Cover
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use contact any surface.
protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
low glare surface.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
7
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the
car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
Convertible Top Care – If Equipped
NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every
2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicles interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
Washing
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap
solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use
detergent.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings
may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains
persist, contact your local authorized dealer for further
suggestions.
7
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Cavity
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
1
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
F12
F32
2
3
4
5
Fuse Panel
6
F53
F38
F36
F43
Mini
Fuse
Description
7.5 Amp Right Low Beam
Brown
5 Amp Front and Rear
Tan
Ceiling Lights
Trunk and Door
Courtesy Lights
5 Amp Instrument Panel
Tan
Node
20 Amp Central Door LockYellow ing
10 Amp Diagnostic Socket,
Red
Car Radio, Climate
Control System
20 Amp Bi-Directional
Yellow Washer
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
Cavity
7
8
9
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
F48
F13
F50
F51
10
Mini
Fuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
7.5 Amp
Brown
7.5 Amp
Brown
5 Amp
Tan
Passenger Power
Window
Left Low Beam,
Headlamp Leveling
Airbag
Car Radio Switch,
Climate Control
System, Stop Light,
Clutch
Cavity
11
12
13
14
Vehicle
Fuse
Number
F37
Mini
Fuse
Description
5 Amp
Tan
Stop Light Switch,
Instrument Panel
Node
Exterior Mirror,
GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor
Ignition, Climate
Control
Driver Power Window
F49
5 Amp
Tan
F31
5 Amp
Tan
20 Amp
Yellow
F47
7
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
Front Distribution Unit
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse
F01
60 Amp
Blue
F02
20 Amp
Yellow
F03
20 Amp
Yellow
F04
40 Amp
Orange
F05
70 Amp
Tan
F06
20 Amp
Yellow
F06
30 Amp
Green
F07
40 Amp
Orange
Mini Fuse
Description
Body Controller
Audio Amplifier
Ignition Switch
Anti-Lock Brake
Pump
Electric Power
Steering
Radiator Fan Single Speed
Radiator Fan Low Speed
Radiator Fan High Speed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
Cavity Maxi Fuse
F08
30 Amp
Green
F09
F10
F11
F11
F14
F15
F16
Mini Fuse
Description
Blower Motor
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp Tan
Powertrain
F17
Horn
F18
Powertrain
F18
Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
High beam (Shutter)
Cigar Lighter
F19
Transmission
F23
15 Amp
Blue
7.5 Amp
Brown
Cavity Maxi Fuse
F17
F20
F21
Mini Fuse
25 Amp
White
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
5 Amp Tan
7.5 Amp
Brown
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
Powertrain
Powertrain
Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
Air Conditioning
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Fuel Pump
Anti-Lock Brake
Valves
7
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse
F24
F30
F82
F84
F85
F87
F90
30 Amp
Green
Mini Fuse
Description
7.5 Amp Stability Control
Brown
System
15 Amp Fog Lamps
Blue
Sunroof/
Convertible Top
10 Amp Transmission
Red
15 Amp Rear Defroster,
Blue
Heated Mirrors
5 Amp Tan Lights
5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
REPLACEMENT BULBS
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Overhead Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C5W If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp. . . . . . . . . HIR2
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps. . . . . W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WY21W
Side Direction Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P21W/5W
Rear Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(See Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
7
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right. 4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand 1. Open the liftgate.
access to side marker lamp.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove assembly.
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner
7
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Unsnap backplate and separate from the lamp hous- 2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly.
ing.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and re5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
place it.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
6. Close the back cap locking it properly.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the
1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening guard caps.
screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4 Liter Engine
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR# Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) — with Manual
Transmission
1.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR# Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) — with Automatic Transmission
U.S.
10.5 Gallons
Metric
40 Liters
4 Quarts
4 Liters
4.6 Quarts
4.4 Liters
5.8 Quarts
5.5 Liters
7
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR# Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/152,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR# Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
DCPR7E-N-10 (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm])
87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR# C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid
MOPAR# AW-1 Transmission Fluid
MOPAR# DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 353 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
! Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
352 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainif the oil change indicator message is NOT illumitenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
nated.
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
E
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
D time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
comes first.
U
Based
on
engine
operation
conditions
the
oil
change
L
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
E indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
S is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
8 as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Change Engine Oil” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 353 M
At Each Stop For Fuel
A
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct I
N
operation.
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level At Each Oil Change
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
• Change the engine oil filter.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the engine coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, and add as needed.
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
CAUTION!
S
C
Failure to perform the required maintenance items H
E
may result in damage to the vehicle.
D
U
Required Maintenance Intervals
L
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following E
S
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M 354 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
N
T 6 Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N Included in the Maintenance Program
A
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
C
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Included in the Maintenance Program
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 355 M
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
Included in the Maintenance Program
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 356 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N
T Included in the Maintenance Program
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 32,000 miles (52 000 km).
A ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
N ❏ Replace the spark plugs.
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E ❏ Replace cabin filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect CV joints.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 357 M
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 358 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Check and adjust hand brake.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 359 M
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Check and adjust hand brake.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361 M
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Check and adjust hand brake.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363 M
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Replace cabin filter.
❏ Clean and lube sun roof tracks.
❏ Inspect brake linings.
❏ Inspect CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace engine coolant.
❏ Replace the timing belt.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
! Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
! If You Need Assistance
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
! Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
! Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Fiat Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
! Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
9
368 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
! Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 369
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
370 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized FIAT Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (888) 242–6342
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuniconcern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center.
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
ter should include the following information:
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
• Owner’s name and address
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
• Authorized dealership name
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
a Bell Relay Service operator.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 371
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service concerns.
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
9
372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the individual problems between you, your authorized
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group dealer, and the manufacturer.
Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
market.
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also • Service Manuals
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforhttp://www.safercar.gov.
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainIn Canada
ing, servicing, and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
should contact the Customer Service Department immedisystem, and/or components is written in straightforward
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
to the Canadian government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practiPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vewebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mashicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acfind and correct problems the first time, using step-bycepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
for an order form.
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
and equipment.
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles
vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
teristics and climate.
ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled condiTraction Grades
tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenand C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on erate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboraWARNING!
tory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
378 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 323
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 312
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,194,315
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,50
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,55,70,135
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,46,49,50
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 44,46,50
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 322,347,348
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 194
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,329
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
INDEX 379
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 20
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,326
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,230
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 67
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 347
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,265
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,306
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,58
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
10
380 INDEX
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 186
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,348
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,325
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,325
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 322
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,191,192,198
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
INDEX 381
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Emergency, In Case of
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Driving
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 306
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Engine
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,265
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 109
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,347,348
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 144
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10
382 INDEX
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . 50,301
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,68,265
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,319
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,348
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 348
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,134
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,348
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,266
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
INDEX 383
Light . . . . . . .
Octane Rating .
Requirements .
Tank Capacity .
Fuel System Caution
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
134 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
261
261 Hazard
347
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
266
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,267
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,347
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Gauges
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,260 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
10
384 INDEX
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,287
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
15
14
11
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,100
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,55,70,135
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
INDEX 385
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 138
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 136
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,102,134
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 133
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Lubrication, Body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 138,307
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,329
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10
386 INDEX
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,52 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 27,44,46,50 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,271
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,373
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,347 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 242
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Power
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 121
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,347 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
INDEX 387
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,62
Pretensioners
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,189 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 187
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10
388 INDEX
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,102
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 109,135
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . 187
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,342
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
INDEX 389
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 297
. . . . . . . . 118
. . . . . . . . 40
. . . . . . . . 312
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 194
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 142,272
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 242
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,246,374
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,243
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 256
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,246
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
10
390 INDEX
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,329
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,134
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
186
374
186
261
Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,342
Wait to Start Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . 133
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,372
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,107
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
INDEX 391
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,119
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,191,192
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,107
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,316
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2012 FIAT 500
2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
12FF500-126-AF
Sixth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500
Open as PDF
Similar pages